Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.Introduction In this tutorial. Finally. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.

2 .

Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows. fixtures. Add more detailed modelling elements. such as mechanical equipment. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and piping. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. 3 . and plumbing fixtures. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Germany. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. electrical panels. electrical. Add basic MEP elements. such as duct. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson.

For example. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Metric file names have an _m suffix. views. Contact your CAD manager for more information. When you install the training files as instructed. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. you can choose to save your work. So. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. and tags. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. For example. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. your Training folder may be in a different location. you learn where the training files are located. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. when you add ductwork. to provide a richer and more finished design. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. You do not design entire systems. Metric: files for users working with metric units. NOTE Depending on your installation. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Create detail views. annotations. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. On the Contents tab. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. is located and accessed in the training files location. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. After completing each exercise. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. When you open a training file. as well as how to open and save them. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. In this exercise. however. However. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Create schedules. templates. and sheets to document the project. such as templates and families.

depending on the instructions in the tutorial. Accessing Training Files | 5 . enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. the Open dialog displays. select the folder in which to save the new file. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. and click Save. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. verify that Project Files (*. 8 If you have made changes. a list of file types displays. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Files of type. For example.rvt) is selected. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. For File name. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file.rvt. scroll down. and you can open any supported file type. you are prompted to save the changes. if you open settings. You may close the file with or without saving changes. click ➤ Save As. and click the Training Files icon. and click Open. 4 Click the training file name.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified.rvt and make changes. double-click Imperial or Metric. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. 3 In the right pane. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location.

6 .

Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. You learn the terminology. drawing sheets. In the Revit MEP model. the floor or roof remains connected. scope. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. sections. the door retains this relationship to the partition. drawings. and phases when you need it. hence. If you move the partition. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the parameter is one of association or connection. every drawing sheet. the hierarchy of elements. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. In this case. schedules. and schedules required for a building project. quantities. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. ■ ■ 7 . and plans. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. In this case. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the operation of the software is parametric. If the length of the elevation is changed. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. As you work in drawing and schedule views. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. 2D and 3D view.

ducts. tags. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. sprinklers. They help to describe or document the design. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. grids. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Examples include detail lines. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. levels. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and electrical panels. and reference planes are datum elements. sprinklers. When you change something. For example. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. boilers. ducts. Datum elements help to define project context. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. sinks.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. walls and ceilings are hosts. and electrical panels. filled regions. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. They display in relevant views of the design. dimensions. and 2D detail components. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. sinks. For example. boilers. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and keynotes are annotation elements. tags. dimensions. For example.

you can explicitly control them. elevation views. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. This information includes components used to design the model. schedules. If you can draw. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. floors. and ceilings. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. programming is not required. such as roofs. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. or bottom of foundation. North . In other cases. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. top of wall. However. The project file contains all information for the building design. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. from geometry to construction data. Project: In Revit MEP. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. families. first floor. and drawings of the design. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. and types. section views. By using a single project file. For example. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. for example. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. To place levels. views of the project.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP. you must be in a section or elevation view. Most often. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Often. and so forth). industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers.

Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. each in-place family contains only a single type. identical use. However. For example. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. With a few clicks. showing. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. pipes. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. such as a 30” X 42” title block.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Then experiment with them. Type: Each family can have several types. and wires. A type can also be a style. A type can be a specific size of a family. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. hiding. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. You can also display several project views at one time. or layer the views to see only the one on top. For example. Unlike system and standard component families. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. System families can be transferred between projects. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. System families include ducts. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. and similar graphical representation. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). For example.

Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. To return the panel to the ribbon. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.

and CAD files. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools used for adding 2D information to a design. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools used for managing and modifying the current view.. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. data and systems. and for switching views. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. When working on the Modify tab. project and system parameters. architect-specific tools. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools used for running analysis on the current design. and settings.. select the tool first. tools used for editing existing elements. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. then select what you want to modify. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain.

provides access to common tools. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. when adding duct. displays frequently used tools. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. To keep a panel expanded. For example. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. provides requested information. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). By default. closes the application menu (double-click). Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects.

(Export) On the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. (Open) save the current drawing... (Save As) export the current drawing. select a template and create a new drawing. such as Export and Publish.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. click. select a file to open. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.

.On the application menu. annotation.. or template file.. (Publish) print the current drawing. publish the current project. family. or template file.. (Licensing) close the file. to. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. To enable or disable a tool item. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. Camera. family. (Print) access product and license information. provides views including Default 3D. annotation. saves a current project. but is not enabled by default. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. click. and Walkthrough.

Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Starting with the most recent command. check the Status Bar. workshared components. or the Family Editor. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. In addition. displaying the same information. When you are using a command. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. This displays the command history in a list. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. when you switch to another editing mode. However. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. When you are highlighting an element or component. Clear the Status Bar check mark. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. To show the Status Bar again.To undo or redo a series of operations. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Modify. Group. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. repeat the command. To hide the Status Bar. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Clipboard. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type.

including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . click (Modify). When you place an element in a drawing. select one or more elements of the same category. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. for example. Place a Wall. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. To change existing elements to a different type. On the Quick Access toolbar.To cancel or exit the current command. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. After you are familiar with these tasks. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. 1 Click ➤ Open. In the following steps. For example. Zoom the view In the tutorials. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .rvt.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. There are several ways to access zoom options. click Training Files. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.

and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. on the Navigation bar. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. this is referred to as a crossing selection. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 9 To display SteeringWheels. When you release the mouse button. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Modifying the View | 19 . To modify or add snap increments. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 6 Click in the drawing area. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. In the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. the view zooms in on the selected area. click . The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x).

You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and click tin the Options dialog. press ESC. For more information about SteeringWheels. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click the SteeringWheels tab. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. moving the wheel to the desired location. Click and drag to orbit the design. and then using the Zoom tool again. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. ➤ Options. As you move the mouse. 14 To exit the wheel. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design.

17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. called drag controls. Small blue dots. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. and open Level 2 . After you are familiar with these tasks. display along the ends. Similar controls.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. and select the duct. 2 Enter ZR. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. bottoms. These are the drag controls. Performing Common Tasks | 21 .HVAC Plan . it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. as shown. referred to as shape handles.

All changes you make to a project are tracked. Move. 6 On the Undo menu. on the Standard toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. select the first item in the list. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps.3 Click and drag the bottom control. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). In this example. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.

such as Move and Copy. The duct is moved to the new position. 11 With the duct already selected. as shown. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. click to specify the starting position. In this case. Some commands.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. After selecting the element to move. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . require 2 clicks to complete the command. for example. you want to move the duct. and click again to specify the ending position. and drag it to the left as shown. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. 10 Move the cursor to the right.

Click OK.End a command Some commands. 13 To end a command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.Supply. For example. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Press ESC twice. Select Mechanical . Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .Return. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. such as the Modify Ducts command. 14 Enter VG. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. such as coordination review and interference checking. 2 In the New Project dialog. Finally. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. settings. and loadable families. In that case. You can either select a template from the template library. select Project. create and manage views. under Create new. 6 Click OK. such as the default project units and settings. use copy/monitor. system families. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. such as ducts and pipes. New projects inherit all the families. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. click Browse. link files. and click Open. you learn how to start a project from a template. and modify system settings. the default building levels and standard views. You can choose from several templates. click Training files. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point.rte template. 27 . You also learn how to use collaboration tools. under Template file.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. and geometry from the starting template. 5 In the New Project dialog. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.

When you select the material. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK twice.7 In the Project Browser. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. navigate to Imperial Templates. For Location. 8 In the drawing area. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). click (Browse). select School or University. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. select Manchester. select Project template. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you can select it now. In the Choose Template dialog. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. for City. ■ ■ Under Create new. NH. Click OK. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. If you want to use a template other than the default. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. click Browse. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. ■ For Building Construction. for Energy Data. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . create another new project using the Construction template.rte template and click Open. 10 Using the same method. For example. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. and open North. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. review the construction materials listed. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. click Edit. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. Click Cancel. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. select Level 1. under Energy Analysis. (Browse).

Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Sizes.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. click Rectangular. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 5 1/2". 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. under Duct Settings. click Wiring. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 10 1/2". 11 1/2". 4 1/2". plumbing. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. for 3/4". piping. and 12 1/2". for 3 1/2". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. click Round. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. For Categories. 4 1/2". 27 Click OK. Click OK twice. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 33 Click OK. under Pipe Settings. and 5 1/2". Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 24 In the right pane. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Identity Data. and demand factors for electrical systems. 25 In the left pane. select Views. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 23 In the left pane. under Duct Settings. and fire protection systems. power distribution systems. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family.rfa and click Open. wiring. After standard settings have been established for an organization. Holding CTRL. for 3 1/2". Creating an MEP Project | 29 .rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 26 In the right pane. 22 In the right pane.

To enable this coordination. click Training. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. select Sub-Discipline. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select Auto . synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. In addition. under Template file. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 4 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click OK. under Create new. select Project. For Then by. families. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders.rvt. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. For Sort by. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 38 Close the file. select View Name. Click Open. select Family and Type. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Linking Projects In this exercise. select Associated Level. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. sheets. and groups that are contained in a project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. click Browse. From the Positioning list.Origin to Origin. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. You need to create the MEP model for the project. Notice that the file is saved as a template.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. or families. and select it as the library path. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Load. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. templates. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. Save. and click OK twice. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list.11 In the Places dialog. 15 Under Library Name. and click Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and change the name to My Library. click (Add Value). click My Library. and click (Browse). ➤ Open. click the My Library icon. and Import dialogs.

26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 27 Click OK.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 20 Click ➤ Options. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. such as bump maps. 9 In the text editor. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. select Ignore words in uppercase. 5 In the text editor. click Places. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 23 Click 24 Click OK. view the current path. click the Spelling tab. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. If you work in a large office. specify the new location here. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 3 Under Settings. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. click OK. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Edit. This path is determined during installation. If you want to relocate this path. 11 In the Options dialog. click Edit. and decal image files. 2 In the Options dialog. 12 Create a new project using the default template. custom color files. 22 Select My Library. 19 Click Cancel. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 14 Click in the drawing area. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 21 On the File Locations tab.

click Close. You can turn snap settings on and off. 19 In the Options dialog. In this exercise. 22 In the text editor. click Browse. click the Spelling tab. click OK. delete sheetmtl-CU. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. and enter 1 . 20 Under Settings.17 In the Spelling dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 18 Click ➤ Options. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click Training Files.. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. you modify snap increments.rte. click File menu ➤ Save. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 6 In the Snaps dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 24 In the Options dialog. click Restore Defaults. 23 In the text editor. work with snapping turned off. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. under Template file. under Dimension Snaps. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. As you zoom in and out within a view. you modify snap settings. 2 In the New Project dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 25 Close the file without saving it. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click Edit. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click OK. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 4 In the New Project dialog.

For example. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. deselect Chain. and move the cursor to the right. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. If it does not. 10 On the Options Bar. snapping reverts to the system default settings. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 8 In the Snaps dialog. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . While sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. If you do not have a wheel button. enter SM. zoom out until it does so. TIP To zoom while sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. This is the increment that you added previously. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design.7 Under Object Snaps. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. click OK. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. such as ZO to zoom out. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’.

23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 26 Close the file. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously.. Notice that snapping is once again active. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 19 Enter SM. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 22 Move the cursor downward. and the wall edges.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and move the cursor to the right. with or without saving it. If you move the cursor along the wall. Do not set the wall end point. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and specify the wall endpoint. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and delete the value 1’ . Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. the midpoint. 25 Click OK.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

go to http://www. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. and then you create a plenum level. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This system consists of a cooling tower.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. At the end of the tutorial. However. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In this lesson. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. By following the recommended workflow. duct system and a hydronic piping system. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you first plan the system. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. 45 . methodology. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you can choose to save your work. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. In this exercise. After finishing each exercise.autodesk. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After applying a color scheme to the zones. As you create the mechanical system. you will understand the process. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. water source heat pump (WSHP). To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. If the tutorial training files are not present. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you first configure the linked architectural model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you design a mechanical system for an office building.

and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. select Room Bounding. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .rvt. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. 1 In the Project Browser. ceilings. you add a level for plenums. under Constraints. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. Next. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. roof. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In this section. NOTE When working with a linked file. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. These components are defined in the architectural training file. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and after the linked model highlights. click Training Files. not in the MEP training file. click to select it.Space Plan is highlighted.

Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. Click Plan View Types. and double-click West . verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. The new level is placed.MEP. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. For Offset. 9 On the Draw panel. Preparing Spaces | 47 . enter 8'. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and enter Level 2 Plenum. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 16 Press Esc. and in the Plan View Types dialog. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line.6 In the Project Browser. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and click OK. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added.

This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Under View Depth. and for Offset. for Default View Template. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. enter 0. and then place spaces in various types of areas. For Cut plane.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. select Level Above (Level 3). you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. enter an Offset of 1' 0".Plenum. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. select MEP . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. click Edit.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum Plan. For View Classification. and click Apply Default View Template. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. Under Extents. for View Scale. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. for Top. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. you can choose to save your work. In this exercise. you place spaces in areas of the building model. NOTE After finishing each exercise. ■ Click OK twice. for Level. for View Range. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Design. For Sub-Discipline. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. 20 In the Project Browser. Under Identity Data. In this exercise. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. However. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. and click Properties. right-click Level 2 Plenum. In the next exercise. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.

Space Plan is highlighted. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. Placing Spaces | 49 . 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. select Level 2 Plenum. select Horizontal. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. walls.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. For (Tag Location).rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. For Space. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. and ceilings). For Offset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 0. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. select New. For Upper Limit. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser.

Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. enter 219. For Name. ensuring coordination between the files. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 14 In the drawing area. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. enter Library. 9 Select the space. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file.7 Click to place the space. for Number. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection.

For Offset. Placing Spaces | 51 . change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. enter 0. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 21 Using the method learned previously. and then click Modify. For Upper Limit. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it.

25 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click OK. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .22 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. and then split the space using a space separation line. you place a space in a large corridor area. under Energy Analysis.

select Level 3. enter 0. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.Space Plan is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. for Upper Limit.rvt. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. and for Offset. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then press Esc.

7 In the Project Browser. and press Enter. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. which was numbered 219Q. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 10 Using the same method. In the schedule. 9 In the floor plan. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. enter Corridor. 11 Close the schedule view. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the plan view would have updated with the changes. double-click the space name. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. as shown. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. and scroll to the newly placed space. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. change the space number to 216A.

Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.15 Press Esc twice. 16 Using the method learned previously. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 18 Close the file with or without saving it. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. place a space in the lower area of the split space.

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.rvt. If necessary. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. click Training Files. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. you place a space in a chase. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).Space Plan is highlighted. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.

and then click OK. for Name. enter 0.4 Press Esc. expand Spaces. select Interior and Reference. 12 Click in the section view. for Upper Limit. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . and click Element Properties. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. enter 4'. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. For Offset. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. click in the chase area to place the space. select Level 3. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 225PC. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Under Identity Data. right-click. For Limit Offset. In the plan view. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. For Number. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. select Roof Level. 10 In the plan view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. for Upper Limit. select the space. On the Options Bar. enter Chase. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 6 Enter VG.

and click OK. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. and maximize the view. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select Space Tag With Volume. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In the next exercises. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. under Loaded Tags. floors. All spaces in the view are tagged. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 17 Type ZF. 15 Press Esc. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Space Plan. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. ceilings.Bounding elements (such as walls.

Zoning is highlighted. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. under Spaces. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. indicating that it’s the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. which removes the space from the Default zone. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. To display space reference lines.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. After a space is placed in an area. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Reference. it is automatically added to the Default zone. click View ➤ Zones. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . In this exercise. click Training Files.

and click Finish Editing Zone. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. To display space reference lines. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. select Occupiable. 4 In the drawing area. indicating that the space is occupiable. click Reference. Using the Edit Zone tab. indicating that it’s the active view. Next. and a new zone is created. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. The Zone tool is active. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click 121 Cafeteria. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and click OK. you assign spaces to zones in the building. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. under Spaces. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The graphic in the System Browser updates. under Energy Analysis. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.rvt. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and Electrical 220 spaces. the Edit Zone tab displays.5 In the System Browser. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. you can add or remove a space from the zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Instruction 221. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Zoning is highlighted. click Training Files. select Computer Lab 222. you assign spaces to a zone. and verify the zones in the System Browser. As you do this. and modify the zone properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Instruction. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. type VG. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . you need to activate the zone visibility. 5 With the drawing area active.In the System Browser. Expand HVAC Zones. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. select HVAC Zones. To view the zone in the drawing area. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Click OK. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone).

NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. and click OK. click Training Files.West .West . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Area B.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 11 Close the System Browser. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . To display space reference lines. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning is highlighted.rvt. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. You activated zone visibility in the views. click Reference. indicating that it’s the active view. 9 In the System Browser.Zoning. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. click Finish Editing Zone. for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 2 . and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. under Spaces. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. expand 2 . verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. and verify the zone in the System Browser. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. under Identity Data.TIP After you finish editing the zone.

12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. Select Attached End. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. zoom out. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . Verify that the distance is 1/2".Zoning floor plan. click in the Level 2 .Zoning view. 8 In the Level 1 .Zoning view to activate it.5 Click in the Level 1 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Zoning view. 15 Press Esc. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. In this exercise. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. click the corner where the Top. space. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. double-click Level 1 . you verify the building. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. click Training Files.Zoning view. Front.East. for Name Value. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. and click OK. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. and zone information. on the ViewCube. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. enter Lounge . double-click the zone tag.Zoning to make it the active view. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed.

The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. and select 109 Lounge. verify that Wireframe is selected. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. Next. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. With 109 Lounge selected. Using the Highlight tool. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Click (Highlight). Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. click (Isolate). The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. you isolate the space.

click . For Construction Type. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. For People. ■ ■ ■ Next. and then click OK. select Lounge/Recreation. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). and click OK. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. select 1_South_Lounge. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. For Electrical Loads. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. verify that <Building> is selected. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. and in the People dialog. Next. click . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. the space information displays for the selected space. and then click OK. scroll down in the left pane.■ On the Details tab. Below the list of spaces and zones. select 109 Lounge. click . and in the Space Type Settings dialog. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space.

the zone information displays for the selected zone. roofs. click (Shading). verify that <Building> is selected. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . Below the list of spaces and zones. and other room-bounding components. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information.00 °F : N/A is specified. verify that 74. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. 12 Using the methods learned previously. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls.00 °F : N/A is specified. outdoor air per area. For Heating Information. This indicates the cooling set point. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters.00 °F : 54. Next. For Cooling Information. and air changes per hour. This indicates the outdoor air per person. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. heating air temperature. This indicates the heating set point. and humidification set point.00 °F : 90. and dehumidification set point. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. cooling air temperature. verify that 70. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. floors. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge.

select Plenum. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum).Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Under Energy Analysis. For Offset. for Number. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. enter 212P. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Name. Under Energy Analysis. 15 In the Project Browser.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Because this is an unoccupied space. click Cancel. select Plenum. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. open MEP . enter 0. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. select Level 3. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Click OK.

and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. click Training Files. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. NH. and select space Plenum 212P. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. verify that Manchester. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. enter 03101. and zone information.rvt. double-click Level 2 . you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. for City. for Energy Data. under Energy Analysis. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. is selected. and verify that the space has replaced the void. click Edit. click in the Value field. On the Place tab. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. For Postal Code. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. For Location. you verified building.Space Plan. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. select School or University. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. space. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 .

Select Area per person. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. enter 200 Btu/h. you need to select this option. For Building Construction. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Edit.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. If. and click OK. verify that Level 1 is selected. In order to select a space. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. a cooling load. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. select Library . verify that Occupiable is selected. verify that <Building> is specified. select Specified. for Values. and click OK. and then click . For Sensible. Click OK twice. verify that New Construction is selected. verify that 1' 0" is specified. right-click. 8 In the drawing area. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. under Volume Computations. For Sliver Space Tolerance. click in the Value column. For Condition Type. and enter 50 sq. select Heated and cooled. or neither. for Building Service. For Export Complexity. select space Library 219. and click OK. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. ■ On the Weather tab. Under Heat Gain (per Person). ft. and click Element Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. select Specified. enter 150 Btu/h. For Space Type. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. for Values. this option adjusts the times automatically. For Latent. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. both. For Project Phase. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. For People.Audio Visual. For Ground Plane. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting).

You have verified the building information. For Electrical Loads. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. and click OK. Select the space associated with the warning. You should correct the space error in the building model. Next. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . and under Heating Information. There should be no warnings displayed. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Power. it should be corrected before you calculate loads.■ ■ ■ Click OK. verify that School or University is selected. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Click OK twice. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. verify that <Building> is specified. select Actual. for Values. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. is specified. For Building Service. For Location. for Values. NH. click Information). and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. and click to learn the cause for the warning. select Actual. For Building Construction. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). select 219 Library. 12 Click the Details tab. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Calculate. and can be modified here. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. click Edit. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . verify that Manchester.

or zone information. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. space. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. select HVAC Zones. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 17 In the loads report. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. Click OK.Space Plan. under Energy Analysis. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select 219 Library. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 21 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 19 In the drawing area. 3 In the drawing area. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. and a loads report displays. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. weather. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. space. or make any changes to the model. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. In this exercise.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and zone information for the building model. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 16 After you review the loads report. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. For Color Scheme. 15 Review the loads report for project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. click to the right of the building to place the legend.

The new scheme displays in the view. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. under Schemes. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. select the color scheme legend. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Tonnage Range. and click OK.5 Zoom in to the legend. in 1-ton increments. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .

11 Using the method learned previously.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.

For Phase. In the next exercise.Space Fill is the active view. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. click Training Files. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. enter Space Airflow Schedule.12 Close the file with or without saving it. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. more category options are available. select New Construction. Select Schedule building components. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. For Name. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Click OK. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.rvt. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In this exercise. select Spaces. for Select available fields from. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser.

For Fields. select Calculated Supply Airflow. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. and then click . Select Formula. In the Schedule Properties dialog. In the Fields dialog. and then click Conditional Format. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. For Type. Click OK. select HVAC. enter . for Formula. select Number. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Select Ascending. Header. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select Not Between. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. and Blank line. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. enter Airflow Delta. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. select Air Flow. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. select Level. ■ Click Calculated Value. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Discipline. In the Calculated Value dialog. For Then by. and then select Hidden field. and click OK. select Level. select Airflow Delta. For Formula. click (Browse).■ Under Available fields.

and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. ■ The schedule displays. click the color swatch. right-click to access schedule properties. Under Conditions to Use. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. For Background Color. In later exercises. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and click OK. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In the Color dialog. select red. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.■ ■ ■ For Value. a view opens that contains the selected space. In the next lesson. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. verify that Show is highlighted. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In this exercise. Click OK twice. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range.

78 .

you modify air terminal parameters. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. In this lesson. and work with the airflow schedule. you will create supply air systems. 79 .Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. After completing the air systems lesson. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After system creation. Then. As you place the air terminals. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and scroll to space 223.rvt. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Training Files. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 3 In the ceiling view. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. the space crossing lines display.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. verify that Constrain is cleared. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. type 12. and select Supply Diffuser . for Flow. 15 On the Options Bar. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. which in this case is the ceiling grid. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . enter 425 CFM. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. as shown. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. the hosted elements are updated as well. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 13 On the Options Bar. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 17 Move the cursor down. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. The schedule updates with the new flow data. click Place on Face. and then press Esc to end the command. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. and press Enter. and press Enter. select the diffuser.Rectangular Face Round Neck . If the host element is modified or moved. Also. 9 On the Placement panel. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point.

28 On the Placement tab. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Next. 24 In the Open dialog. and click Open. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. As you place the return diffusers. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 22 In the drawing area. click Place on Face.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 21 On the Options Bar. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 25 In the drawing area. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 29 Place 2 diffusers. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. click Yes.rfa. clear Leader. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. select one of the diffusers. 27 Select Return Diffuser . and then press Esc. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. as shown. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object.

Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. click Yes. 31 In the alert dialog. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. and click OK. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Reference. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 32 In the Project Browser. under Other. select Strong Reference. and click to select the lines. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. Level. select one of the return diffusers. as shown.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

For the start point. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . for Constraints ➤ Offset. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter 9' 0"2750. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. 44 Zoom in to space 115. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. and click OK. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. click the Level 1 line. ■ ■ For the end point. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References.

verify that Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. After creating the logical connection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. When you highlight a space. right-click the title. indicating that it’s the active view. including energy analysis. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.Press Esc. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. click Training Files. However. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.HVAC Plan . 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design is highlighted. and click View ➤ Systems. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the space crossing lines display.

12 In the System Browser. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 15 Click Cancel. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 11 In the drawing area. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. As you add diffusers to systems. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. On the Options Bar. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Connect Into. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. System Name. review the Number of Elements. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. the number of elements is updated. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 6 Keep the System Browser open. and Flow value. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223.

This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. In this exercise. for Mark. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. In this exercise. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. which updates the name in the System Browser. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. Rename the system Next. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Click Finish Editing System. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. for System Name. under Identity Data. the air terminals are the children. and the system connects them. 25 Click OK. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 18 Click OK. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection.17 Using the method learned previously. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 22 Click OK. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space).

the Network type provides several solutions. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . which provides various layout tools. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. When you highlight a space using the cursor. the space crossing lines display. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. indicating that it’s the active view. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. select Network. Also. A Generate Layout tab displays. for Solution Type. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 4 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select the upper left diffuser. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.HVAC Plan. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. In this case.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. and display solution 1.Design is highlighted. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .

If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. For Offset. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. enter 9' 10 1/2". For Flex Duct Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Duct Type. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. Click OK. you’ll get an error in a later step.Round. enter 3'. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . as shown. click Modify. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main.7 On the Options Bar. For Duct Type. For Offset. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Select Branch. click Settings. enter 9' 10 1/2". select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.

The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. or offset elevations are incorrect. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . For example. Either relocate the system components. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added.11 Click Finish Layout. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. or manually modify the duct. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select a different layout solution. as is the elbow itself.

98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . If the entire network does not highlight. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. and equipment. thus it is not part of the system. a disconnection exists. The first time you press Tab. Usually. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. under Graphics. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. for Values Displayed. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. but not all values are used in this view. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. highlight a segment of the main duct. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights.Flow. select Duct Color Fill . Using a flow-based color scheme. fittings. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. for Color Scheme. and click to select it. and then click OK. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. and click OK.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. select By View.

and click OK. for Flow. select the WSHP. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. for Schemes. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Click OK. 20 In the drawing area. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM).Velocity. select one of the diffusers in the system. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. and on the Options Bar. select Duct Color Fill . select the color scheme legend. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and press Enter. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.Airflow. under Mechanical . and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area.

for Branch Sizing. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. highlight a segment of the duct. and then click to select it. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. select Calculated Size Only. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Under Constraints. and enter . and select 16". The ductwork and fittings are updated.08 in-wg/100ft. Click OK. Select the upper segment of main duct. Select Only. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. click Cancel. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and drag it to the right. Select Restrict Height. select Friction.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area.

so that you can modify the system design accordingly. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Use the information that displays (flow. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. pressure. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. static pressure. Using this tool. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). and pressure loss.

102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 35 Click Finish.NOTE As you inspect a system. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. also known as the critical path.rvt.

6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct.Design is highlighted. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.HVAC Plan . and select the WSHP. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and click Draw Duct.

for Offset. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. NOTE When drawing duct. 15 On the ViewCube. Front.3D MEP. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . click the corner where the Top. 11 On the Options Bar. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. right-click the connector grip. double-click MEP . and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 14 In the Project Browser. select the top right diffuser. select 9' 10 1/2". The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. and click Draw Duct.

19 In the drawing area. the color fill indicates the flow value. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The ductwork is automatically created. Also. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct).16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 22 Using the same method. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . in space 115. it is considered a closed loop.

A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. You can ignore the warning. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. 25 Press Esc.

28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 30 Press Esc twice. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. and then click Modify. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. and click to select it. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run.

The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select a segment of the main duct. and click OK. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. under Mechanical . 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and then click OK. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. clear Restrict Height.Airflow. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. for Flow. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 40 Using the same method. under Constraints. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . such as a plenum. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

In this lesson. Create return and supply piping systems. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Automatically and manually lay out piping.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. 109 . Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. and a cooling tower located on the roof. including 2 base mounted pumps. Then. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. on level 3 of the building model.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you place mechanical equipment. click Training Files.

NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. and select WSHP .2-6 Tons . indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 7 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Wall faces is selected. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. in corridor 328. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Left Return . Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .High Efficiency .Horizontal . as shown. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.HVAC Plan .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.

13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. and in the Type Selector. and enter 2'. as shown. click the top edge of the WSHP. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 10 Select the WSHP. as shown.8 Click the corridor wall face. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. click the dimension. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. verify that the WSHP is still selected. and click to place the dimension.

enter 9'. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. select the 2 WSHPs. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. for Water Flow. Click OK. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click to place it in the mechanical room. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Under Mechanical. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . enter 12 GPM.14 Click Modify. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. as shown.

A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create the logical connection between the system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. you create the return and supply piping systems. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.21 Click Modify. including flow and pressure. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems.

physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Mech 330). click Training Files. You can create pipes to connect system components. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating a Piping System | 115 .rvt. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. and click View ➤ Piping. analyses cannot be performed. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.HVAC Plan . and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. but without a corresponding system.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . where it is easier to review the information. 5 In the System Browser. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. right-click the Systems column heading. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Unlike logical connections (systems).

9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. and the Edit System tool is not active. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 In the drawing area. Assigning a system component to an existing system. while pressing Ctrl.In the System Browser. Notice that on the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. select the boiler. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Therefore. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. select the 2 WSHPs. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. As you assign equipment to systems. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. for System Name. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. This display indicates that the system is selected.

double-click Roof . Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. and select the cooling tower.HVAC Plan . 19 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. Creating a Piping System | 117 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. under Design ➤ HVAC . You have created the hydronic return system.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.Design. for System Name.13 Click Finish Editing System.

25 Select the boiler. and bypasses the cooling tower. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 28 Using the same method. 26 Click Finish Editing System. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 29 Right-click CHWS. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Select. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser.22 In the Select Connector dialog. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. expand the Hydronic Return system category. In heating mode. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. and click Expand All. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. In cooling mode. 23 Close the roof plan view. indicating the logical connection. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and click OK.

and click Properties.In the System Browser. you can view several parameters. under Mechanical. expand Piping. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. You also manually modify the layout path as required. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. and click Column Settings. and click OK. and click OK. for Water Flow. enter 18 GPM. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 32 In the System Browser.

Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. click Training Files. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 5 In the Filter dialog. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). When you draw a box to select components.HVAC Plan . and click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. select Mechanical Equipment. you can place the cursor over a system component. the boiler. click Check None. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green.rvt. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. and click to select it. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. press Tab to highlight the system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A system preview displays in red. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 9 In the Select a System dialog.Mech 330). then the Select a System dialog displays. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . select CHWR. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 10 Click OK. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP.Design is highlighted.

11 On the Options Bar. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. enter 1' 6''. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. 13 Click Cancel. structural beams. click Settings. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Perimeter. verify that Solutions is selected. It does not reference the architecture. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. For Inset. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. duct. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. or architectural components. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.

16 Click Finish Layout. the flow for one WSHP is 18. to display the path with thinner lines. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and press Tab 3 times. 19 In the drawing area. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. 17 Optionally. With each Tab. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. and the flow for the other is 12. Verify the flow In a previous exercise.

The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. under Mechanical. 22 Select the boiler. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and click OK. and click OK. 23 Under Mechanical. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 24 Press Esc. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. and access its instance properties.

29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. double-click Level 1 . 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. Logically. which propagates flow throughout the system. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. Next. 32 Click Finish Editing System. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. you physically close the CHWR loop. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 27 On the System Tools panel.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. On the Options Bar. click Edit System. the Number of Elements is now 8. 28 In the Project Browser. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.

the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). select a WSHP. access its instance properties. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. under Mechanical. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. 38 Using the same method. as shown. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 .34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. 35 Using the drag control. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. and click Cancel.

enter 0''/12''. Click Settings. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 41 Click OK. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. For Slope. and then click OK. enter 1' 6''. For Inset. select CHWS. select Perimeter 1 of 5. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .40 In the Select a System dialog.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . 46 Click Modify. 48 While pressing Ctrl. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. (Both sections are at the same elevation. as shown. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 47 In the drawing area. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). In a later exercise. as shown.

or offset elevations are incorrect. Add piping to close the supply loop. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. select a different layout solution. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 51 Click Finish Layout. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe.50 Using the same method. To create the piping system.

double-click 3D HVAC Building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. As you work in the training file. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. and the return pipes are magenta. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.Design ➤ 3D Views.Design is highlighted.

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. select the section of piping. 6 Press Delete. 7 In the plan view.

■ Click to move the piping.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 9 In the 3D view. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the boiler. Click to specify the reference point. and press Esc to clear the selection.

Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. and click Draw Pipe. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. select the boiler. 12 In the 3D view. select the return pipe riser. and the lower one is secondary. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and the boiler is connected to the return piping. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. The connections are automatically created.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. and click OK. 13 In the plan view. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. ■ Move the cursor down. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and you select 1 connector. enter 2'. and press Enter.In a plan view. enter 1' . for Offset. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 .7''. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.

select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. As you place piping runs that are close together. 18 Press Esc twice. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the appropriate fittings are created.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. and click OK. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. as shown. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 In the plan view. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. select the primary base mounted pump. and select it.

and click Draw Pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . right-click the bottom connector. 27 Move the cursor to the right. and when the connector point displays. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. you select the tee fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 29 If necessary. 28 Press Esc. and click to draw the pipe.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click the minus symbol. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. click to connect to the pump.

enter 4'. select the primary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. right-click the discharge connector. 33 Press Esc. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. 31 On the Options Bar.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. these pipe connections were created automatically. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. as shown. 35 Using the method learned previously.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .

and press Enter. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. right-click the bottom control on the tee. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 9' 6''. ■ Move the cursor down. for Offset. type 1'. and click to create the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view.

Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. right-click. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. and click Element Properties. Next. you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .

46 Press Esc. 44 In the 3D view. the value is 0 GPM. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. under Mechanical. view the properties for the secondary pump. 48 In the plan view. 41 Using the same method. as shown. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. Connect the cooling tower Next. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . When you create the pumps in parallel. 43 Press Esc. 42 Click OK. select the cooling tower. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 40 Click Cancel. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. under Mechanical. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Instance Properties dialog. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). for Cooling Water Flow. right-click. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The flow is being propagated through the piping. and click OK.50 or 50% of the Flow. and click Element Properties. notice that under Mechanical. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe.

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet).

select the cooling tower.50 In the 3D View. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. click Training Files. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . When the valve is open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. and is heated by the boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Valves In this exercise. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.rvt. and close the dialog. the water bypasses the cooling tower. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).

7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and select Ball Valve . indicating that it’s the active view. as shown.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Adding Valves | 143 . 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. The bypass valve is closed by default. verify that the Diameter value is 3''.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 4 On the Options Bar. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 8 Press Esc twice.

2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Using the same method.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. parallel to the previously placed valve. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 12 Select Ball Valve .10 Press Esc. place another Ball Valve . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. 20 Select the bypass valve. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. right-click. Adding Valves | 145 . validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. and click Element Properties. 19 Using the same method. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position).Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. and select Ball Valve . you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. In heating mode.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. and click OK. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. and select Ball Valve . (This valve allows the water to flow through it.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM.rvt.Design is highlighted. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.HVAC Plan .22 Using the method you just learned. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. Initially. indicating that it’s the active view. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. click Training Files. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. for Schemes. and click OK. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.Size. and click OK.Flow. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. Sizing Pipe | 147 .4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. click Pipe Color Fill . select Pipe Color Fill .

and click to select the branch.25 FT/100ft. and for Velocity. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Under Constraints. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Friction. Click OK. enter 5 FPS.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. for Branch Sizing. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. and enter 2. Select And. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 13 Press Esc.

Using the System Inspector. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or manually modify the pipe. Inspecting the System In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Either relocate the system components. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. or offset elevations are incorrect. pressure. Inspecting the System | 149 .rvt. click Training Files. select a different layout solution. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser.

An inspection flag reports the section number. and pressure information including pressure loss. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. This information helps you modify the system design. as required. flow.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.

Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. inspect Section 6 again. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. select 90° F. for Fluid Temperature. In this exercise. and to size pipe. as shown. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. 9 Using the same method. and the Pressure Loss is 1.88 psi.67 psi.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . the Static Pressure is 7. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. 10 Click Finish. targeting those systems that need attention. you need to validate them. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.89 psi. and click OK. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.

Warnings display. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . After you have assigned all components to systems. and click View. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. the pipe is associated with that system. right-click the Systems titlebar. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. and double-click Level 3 . In the System Browser. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. As you learned when placing components. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description.Design. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. After you assign components to a system. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. 4 In the System Browser.HVAC Plan . 7 In the System Browser. 9 Right-click CHWS. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. If you place components without assigning them to a system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. thus assigning the components to a system. click Training Files. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. For example. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system).Design.rvt. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 1 . Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. 6 In the Project Browser. and for pipe sizing. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. and click Show to view all of the system components. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.

Design floor plan. otherwise. expand the Unassigned folder. 13 Right-click CHWR. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .TIP If you have multiple views open. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click Hydronic Return. 14 Using the methods that you learned. 12 In the System Browser. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 10 Using the same methods. and confirm unassigned system components. click Close. and select Level 3 . and click Expand All. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system.HVAC Plan .

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .

156 .

Define required lighting.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

select Copper. ■ Click New Correction Factor. ■ ■ For Factor. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. As you place components and create circuits. Click OK. click (Open). wiring. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Copper. and demand factors that are applied in the design. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Select Correction Factor. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. enter 1.Wire Sizes. You also add a wiring type. In this exercise you review electrical settings.rvt. For Material. For Temperature.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. distribution systems. select 90. ■ ■ For Material. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. For Temperature Rating. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter THHN. speeding up the design phase. select 75. expand Wiring . select Wiring Types.04. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ In the Color dialog. for Custom Colors. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Click Background Color. select Red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . enter -5 fc and 5 fc. Click OK three times. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red.■ ■ For Value.

Then. power circuits. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Create power loads.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. 167 . using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. First. Use the System Browser to check your design. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. as you place lighting fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Create a panel schedule. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures.

select Orange. select Average Estimated Illumination.00 fc. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. for the Spaces Category. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.00 fc. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rvt. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. select the color legend. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. By using orange as the color for this range. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can create additional color schemes. Under Scheme Definition. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. select the color for Less Than 20. In the Color dialog. click Training Files. for Basic Colors. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .Lighting Color Fill view is open. Click OK.

As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.5 fc range is satisfied. The red field will clear once the +/.277. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.5 fc range.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 13 Click the Level 2 . 8 In the Project Browser. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. zoom to space Library 219. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.Lighting Ceiling plan.7 In the Project Browser. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . which is the lowest value in the specified range.

so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 25 On the Options Bar. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 18 Click to place the fixture. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Select the lighting fixture.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 23 Click OK. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . the fixtures will move accordingly. select Multiple.

select the 3 fixtures.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 30 On the Options Bar. 27 Press ESC to end the command. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 28 In the drawing area.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .32 Press ESC. Note the value in red for the space Library 219.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . select Lighting Fixtures. click Check None. and for Category. Click OK.277V. 36 In the Filter dialog.

The values in the schedule are updated automatically. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 42 In the drawing area. 41 On the Options Bar.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .277V. click the ceiling grid line as shown. select Multiple Alignment. The lighting delta is satisfied. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

The fixture aligns. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. click Training Files. click (Open). 46 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.45 Press ESC to end the command. In the next exercise. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . you modify the light fixture IES files. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures.

Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Lighting Color Fill plan.Lighting Plan. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 2 Tile the views as shown. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . scroll to view space space Library 219. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis.

■ Click OK twice. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . and click OK. select Xenon and click OK. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. enter . select T5 [HO]. for Ballast Loss Factor. Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. for Lamp. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. click the value for Initial Intensity.ies and click Open. Click OK. enter F15. select 463T5_S.93. Under Electrical.00 VA. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. ■ Click Apply. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . In the Select File dialog. ■ Under Photometrics.85. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. specify 15000. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. In the Name dialog. select Luminous Flux. enter 162.277V and click OK. for Type Mark. click the value for Light Loss Factor.00 lm. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. Under Identity Data. for Apparent Load. Under Photometrics. enter . for Color Preset. click the value for Initial Color.

Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. select Lighting Fixtures. Click OK. 10 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. click Check None. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.277V. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. select the top center fixture. 15 In space Library 219. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Note the lighting delta updates again.Press Delete.

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.

rvt. Junction Boxes.Press Delete. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. In the next exercise. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Placing Switches. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Junction Boxes. and receptacles to your design. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Placing Switches. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. 2 In the drawing area. you add switches. and Receptacles | 183 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. junction boxes. click (Open). 19 Close the file with or without saving it.

184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 7 Click to place the switch. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.277V. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.

9 Press ESC to end the command. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Junction Boxes. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 12 In the Load Family dialog. and Receptacles | 185 . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.NoLoad.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Placing Switches. The element type Junction Boxes . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Select Junction Boxes .rfa and click Open.

Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 15 Select the junction box. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. In the Type Properties dialog. Click Edit Type.Offset. note the Number of Poles is 1. enter 9’0”. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Level 2 . NOTE When entering values. 21 In the drawing area. for Mark.14 Press ESC to end the command. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. zoom to space Library 219. enter JB-1NL. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Under Electrical. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. Click OK twice. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.

Select Load. right-click and click Column Settings. 23 In the System Browser. Distribution System. NOTE If necessary. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Junction Boxes. Expand Electrical. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Click OK. and Receptacles | 187 . 24 For any column. Space Number. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Placing Switches. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Number of Elements. Select Size. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Space Name. 26 In the System Browser. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. and Voltage. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Expand General.

Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 31 Close the System Browser. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Junction Boxes. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. select Copy and Multiple. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 189 . 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 40 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the receptacle.

move the cursor along the wall.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and enter 12’ and press ENTER. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.

Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 191 .43 Press ESC to end the command.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and work toward the higher voltage. Adding wiring to a project is optional. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.equipment. 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. click (Open). main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). zoom to the space Electrical 220. click Training Files.

14 Select the panelboard. for Distribution System.Surface: 100A. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. enter PP-2B. For Panel Name. 7 Press ESC to end the command. Click OK.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. select 120/208 Wye. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 On the Options Bar. select 480/277 Wye.Loads. 15 On the Options Bar. for Max. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Distribution System.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. enter 20. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 8 Select the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers.

Click OK. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. which is the logical connection between the elements. enter 20. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 23 In the Filter dialog. For Panel Name. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures.Loads. Click OK. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter LP-2B. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. #1 Pole Breakers. 20 In the drawing area. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. zoom to space Instruction 221. and for Category. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. click Check None. for Max.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.28 Press ESC to end the command. 33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.

right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Select the left three-way switch.

44 Close the file with or without saving it. except without wire. click (Open). 41 In the Filter dialog. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Loads. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. 38 Press ESC to end the command. select Wires. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Check None. Click OK. enter 2. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Hot Conductors. and for Category. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221.

right-click on the Systems heading. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Rating. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Distribution System. click Training Files. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. and Voltage Drop are selected. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. and verify that Load. Click OK. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Expand Electrical. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 13 In the System Browser. expand Power. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220.rvt. Voltage. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 2 In the drawing area. and then expand circuit 1. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit.

The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 30 Close the System Browser. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. under Electrical.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. 22 With the junction box still selected. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. Click OK. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors.

Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. under Identity Data. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. enter FR4. click below the first one to place it. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 40 Click OK twice. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Type Mark. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click Tags.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Click OK. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 47 In the drawing area. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit Type. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Click Yes.

204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Click Save. Click OK. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Break. for File Name. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click OK. For Circuit Number. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. enter a comma. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 52 In the Save As dialog. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Deselect Break and for Suffix. and click Apply.rfa. Next you create a switch system. click Check None. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 56 In the Filter dialog. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Click OK. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. and for Category.

10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter a. under Electrical Lighting.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. Creating a Switch System | 205 . zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. for Switch ID.rvt. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. click (Open). click Training Files. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system.

under Electrical . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. for switch ID. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. enter b.Lighting. Click OK. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.

Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Next you create a circuit and size wire. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. and data systems. and for Category. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. lighting. click Training Files. click Check None. click (Open). select the PP-2B panel. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 4 In the Filter dialog. 7 In space Electrical 220. Circuits are used for power.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select Electrical Fixtures. 2 In the drawing area. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.

navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. select Hook Wire Tick Mark.rfa. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. select Wiring. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. under Electrical . Click OK. for Hot Conductors. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and in the drawing area. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 2. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 15 In the Load Family dialog.Loads. and click Element Properties. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 19 Click OK. and click Open. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 13 Select the wire again.

23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. as shown. and click to select the circuit. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 22 In space Electrical 220. select the PP-2B panel.

29 In space Instruction 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. in space Instruction 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click the connector of the first receptacle. 28 In the drawing area. as shown.26 Press Delete. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns.

3 In the Electrical space. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. click Open. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 2 In the drawing area. 31 Close the file with or without saving it.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. click Training Files. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to space Electrical 220. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Finally. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Next you balance the loads for your design. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. select panel LP-2B. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i.rvt.

14 Close the warning dialog. Scroll down. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and Phase C . The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . enter 30A. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 1-#12. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. Click OK. 1-#10. 6 Click OK. 1-#10. click Rebalance Loads.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Phase B 3636 VA. B. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 1-#12. for Rating. Under Electrical-Loads. and Phase C provides 2028 VA.3616 VA). A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted.3712 VA. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

enter 30A. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and click OK. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. under Electrical . Next you create a panel schedule. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. for Rating. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B.Loads. click (Open). 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. and click OK. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B.Loads.rvt. for Rating. enter 25A. Click OK. Select PP-2B. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. under Electrical . 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. click Training Files. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 17 Close the warning dialog.15 Select panel PP-2B.

8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. and open E601 .rvt. 5 In the Project Browser. Under Header Text. for Font Size. click (Open). 7 Select the schedule. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. click Training Files. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Under Header Text. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Appearance. Under Body Text. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. select Berlin Sans FB. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. for Font Size. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. 4 Close the report. 6 In the Project Browser. click Edit. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. for Font. 11 Click OK twice. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog.Panel Schedules. select Bold and Italic. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. under Other. enter 3/32. enter 1/8. expand Sheets (all).

8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. each with a load of 180VA. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. In the System Browser. select space Lounge 212. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. In the System Browser. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Expand Unassigned. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 . 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. press TAB once.

click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 17 In the drawing area. 16 Close the details dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 15 In the dialog. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. zoom to space Electrical 214. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. select MDP-1. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. for Panel. under Warnings. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Sanitary. type PVC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Properties. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. In this lesson. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. planning is critical to a successful design. and click OK.Plumbing Plan . Adding a pipe size. right-click PVC . 4 In the Name dialog.rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. click Duplicate. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 219 . Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . In this exercise. you create a PVC pipe type. click Training Files.Design is open. in addition to loading existing families.Vent.

26 Click OK. enter 1/2''. Cross. 15 For System Type.5 In the Type Properties dialog. Tee. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . and click Main. 18 For System Type. select None. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings.DWV: Standard. select Branch. select Tee. select Sanitary. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 24 For Inside Diameter. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. and click OK. 13 In the right panel. 27 For the new pipe size. In the Project Browser. 17 In the left pane. click Pipe Settings. enter 5/8''. Tap. 25 For Outside. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . under Pipe Types.Sch 40 .PVC .PVC . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. click Modify. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. select Plastic. enter -4' . 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. For Offset. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . enter 10°. for Nominal. for Material. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. PVC .rfa. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.Sch 40 . enter 27/32''. 22 Click New Size. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. select Sanitary. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. click Training Files. select Tee Vent .Vent is listed.0''. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.DWV: Standard. 10 On the Selection panel. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.PVC . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.Sch 40 . 21 In the right pane. under Mechanical. 6 Click OK. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane.

Create the sanitary plumbing system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and hot and cold water piping. Create the hot water system. 221 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. including plumbing fixtures. vent. sanitary piping. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the cold water system. add a hot water heater. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.

you add 2 toilets. NOTE To identify a space name and number. 1 urinal.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. and verify that Level 1 . as shown. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. including the men’s room (space Male 107).

in the Type Selector. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. select Public .1.Wall Mounted. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Flush Valve . 5 On the Placement panel. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. against the left wall. 1 wall-mounted urinal.6 gpf.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . 4 On the Element panel. as shown. and 3 sinks. under Water Closet .

zoom in closer. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. above the first in the standard toilet space. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the reference line to center the fixture. under Urinal . and press Esc. select 3/4'' Flush Valve.7 Click to place another toilet.) 8 Press Esc. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line.Wall Hung. (Again.

Rectangular. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. select 5''x5'' Strainer . under Floor Drain . you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain.2'' Drain. In placing the fixture. 12 On the Placement panel. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). click Place on Face. 14 Click Modify.

and a floor drain. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. In this exercise. and review the components listed under this system. click Training Files. and click View ➤ Piping. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and Default Domestic Cold Water. right-click in the System Browser table heading. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. a urinal. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.

draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. and verify that Level 1 . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.Design is open.Plumbing Plan . 6 In the plan view. clear Lines (<Overhead>). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Filter dialog. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . Only plumbing fixtures are selected. and click OK.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.

the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for System Name. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary. You include the bathroom space number in the name. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. enter Sanitary 107. 13 In the Systems Browser. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. click Finish Editing System. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. 12 On the Edit System panel. 11 On the Options Bar. so the Create Sanitary System is available. If you deselected the drain. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed.

A preview of the piping layout displays. at the midpoint of the detail lines. and click OK. for example. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. as shown.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base is placed. a toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select one of the components in the system. select Sanitary 107. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. 16 In the Select a System dialog.

You accept this suggested solution. 26 On the Options Bar. 21 On Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. The default settings are automatically modified. and modify it to meet project requirements. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. for Solution Type. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. for Diameter. enter -1' 0''. for Offset. 23 For Offset. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. click Solutions. 25 On the Options Bar.19 On the Options Bar. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and for Offset. enter -1' 0''. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. and click OK. select Branch. select 4''. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 24 In the left pane. enter -4'-0”. select Main. for Slope. enter 1/8'' / 12''. select Intersections. and click Settings. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

select the vertical route path segments. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl.

and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 31 Click Modify. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .30 In the 3D view.

33 Using the previous method. click Finish Layout. 34 On the Generate Layout panel. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

When a fitting is reversed.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it.

The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and check the slope control. as shown. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. you continue with the work from the last exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .

Rectangular.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Public. as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt.Plumbing Plan . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. 5 On the Placement panel. in the Type Selector. select 22''x22'' .Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. under Lavatory . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Element panel. click Training Files.

Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. and press Enter to create a second sink. TIP When entering dimensions. On the Options Bar. For example. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''.7 Click Modify. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. enter 2' 4''. 8 Select the sink. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. select Multiple.

11 In the System Browser. Press Esc. click Add To System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and press Enter to create the third sink. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 16 On the Edit System panel. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. click Finish Editing System. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 In the drawing area.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''.

use the ViewCube to orient the view. with the tee fitting selected. double-click 3D Plumbing.In the System Browser. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . as shown. 21 Select the tee. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system.Design ➤ 3D Views. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 22 In the plan view. 19 In the 3D view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the fitting. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. and click Draw Pipe. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 26 On the Options Bar. and click Apply. for Offset. and click to draw the pipe. enter 1/8'' / 12''. enter 2' . 27 Click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. for Slope. press Spacebar.6''. When you press the Spacebar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In this example.

DWV. click to place the fitting.Sch 40 . and when the vertical center line displays.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 30 In the 3D view.PVC . 32 Select the double wye fitting. 31 Click Modify. move the cursor over the stub pipe. select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 29 In the Type Selector. under Wye 45 Deg Double .

for Offset. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. and press Enter. and press Enter. on the Options Bar. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 36 In the section view.33 With the fitting selected. double-click the section head to open the section view. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 34 Press Esc. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 37 Select the fitting. right-click the right connector. enter 1'. and click Draw Pipe. enter 6''. In the next steps. you add pipe segments to the double wye.

as shown. 41 Using the same method. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 40 Click Modify. 42 Click Modify.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. and click to place the pipe. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).

enter 6''. press Spacebar. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 46 In the section view. and click Draw Pipe. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 48 Click Modify. 49 Using the same method. and press Esc. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. right-click the bottom connector. 47 Move the cursor down. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe.

You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.PVC . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. 54 Click Modify. 55 In the 3D view.DWV. select the P-Trap on the left. 51 In the Type Selector. select Standard.Sch 40 . and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . under Trap P . 53 Using the same method. 52 In the plan view.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 56 Using the same method. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.

. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. connect the right sink to the double wye. Click in the plan view. In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Move the cursor to the left. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. select the left P-Trap. 58 Using the same method. Click Modify. enter 6''. and press Enter. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Select the double wye pipe on the left.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap.

On the Routing Solutions panel. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. In the Type Selector. select PVC Sanitary. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. under Pipe Types. and select a proposed solution. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Press Esc. click Finish to select the recommended solution.■ In the 3D view. select the section of pipe you just drew. as shown. while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks.

63 On the Slope Editor panel. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. 62 On the Options Bar. click Finish. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. adjusting the sanitary stack. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify the slope. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. for Slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.DWV. 7 On the Selection panel. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .PVC .Design. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and click to draw the pipe.Floor level line. as shown.Plumbing Plan . 10 In the 3D view. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select the vertical stack.Sch 40 . 5 Select the tee. click Modify. 9 In the Type Selector. right-click the top connector. and click Draw Pipe.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. select Standard. select the elbow fitting on the right. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Overall. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. 3 In the Section view.

click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 17 In the Type Selector.PVC . 18 In the plan view. enter 1'-0”. 13 Click the rotate control once.DWV. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 12 Select the fitting. select Standard. as shown.Sch 40 .11 Click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. under Plug . for Offset. 15 Press Esc. and click the rotate control to change the orientation.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is open. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and verify that Level 1 . A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.19 Click Modify.

These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. under Design ➤ Plumbing . select Main. click Check None. select Pipe Types: Water. minimize the Sanitary system. 6 In the left pane. and for System Type. draw a selection box to select the toilets. and sinks. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Branch. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.Overall. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.) 10 Click OK. verify that the value is 9' 0''. and click Main. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. 14 In the System Browser. select Domestic Hot Water. select Plumbing Fixtures. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Domestic Hot Water. select Pipe Types: Water. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. For Offset. 15 In the plan view. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 9 In the left pane. if necessary.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . expand Unassigned. select Domestic Cold Water. enter 9' 3''. for System Type. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Branch. For Offset. double-click 3D Plumbing . and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. and click OK. for System Type. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. urinal. 4 In the right pane.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Design ➤ 3D Views. 7 In the left pane. 17 In the Filter dialog.

For Flow Conversion Method. click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. In the System Browser. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . click Finish Editing System. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. 21 On the Edit System panel. enter DCW 107. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. 19 On the System Tools panel.

34 In the plan view. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. under Pipe Types. enter 3' . at the intersection of the water main pipe.2 7/8''. click to the left of the urinal. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the second toilet.25 Using the same method. for Offset. right-click the top DCW connector. and click to place the pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. and press Enter. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 37 On the Options Bar. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Move the cursor to the right. enter 0”/12”. 35 In the Type Selector. select Water. For Offset. and click the connector. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. select the sink above the urinal. enter 10'. select 3/4''. For Slope. as shown. 30 In the plan view. and press Enter. enter 4'0”. 28 In the Type Selector. enter 7''. as shown. 33 Click Modify. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink.

41 Select the top sink. 40 Click Modify. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click OK. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]).39 Move the cursor to the left. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. and click to connect to the main cold water line. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.44 Using the same method. add a water heater. you create the hot water system. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. expand the Unassigned folder.rvt. 2 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. while pressing Ctrl. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select the 3 sinks. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Design is open. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Overall. and verify that Level 1 .

You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first.Tankless. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 15 In the System Browser.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. as shown. Default Domestic Hot Water. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. 13 In the plan view. for System Name. 12 In the Type Selector. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. select 0. Default Domestic Cold Water. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. in the Unassigned folder. 14 Click Modify. under Water Heater . 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the System Browser. When designing systems. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). you edit the system to add equipment. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. verify that DCW 107 is selected. In later steps.6 Gallon.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Edit System. and click OK.

for Offset. Offset: 4' 6''. Slope: 0''/12''. enter 10’. 19 Select the water heater. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. and press Enter. select the water heater. 24 Move the cursor up. enter 1' 6''. and click the water main line. 25 On the Options Bar. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 27 Click Modify. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. and on the Edit System panel. 26 Move the cursor to the right. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . right-click the middle left connector. 22 In the Type Selector.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select Draw Pipe. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. click Finish Editing System.

enter 9' 0''. select 4'-6''. 37 On the Options Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 33 On the Edit System panel. and for Offset. select Domestic Hot Water 107. and in the System Selector. for Diameter. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. and on the Placement Tools panel. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. 36 Move the cursor down. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select a sink. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. click Edit System. enter 1''. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. for Offset. and press Enter. click Finish Editing System. as shown. 30 On the System Tools panel. enter 1' 6''. and click Draw Pipe. 38 Move the cursor to the right.

enter 2' 8''. 42 Click Modify. as shown. for Offset. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar. enter 1’.39 Move the cursor down. 41 Move the cursor down. and click just above the bottom sink.

and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

rvt.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. In this tutorial. However. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can choose to save your work. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. 267 . After finishing each exercise. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. click Training Files. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. go to http://www. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.autodesk. You create a new pipe type. If the tutorial training files are not present. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. 2 Right-click Standard. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Duplicate. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise.

select Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Material. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 9 Click OK. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. duct. you modify the type properties of the pipe. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. and enter Fire Protection Wet. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For Pipe Type. For System Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. verify that 9' 0" is specified. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. In the next exercise. select Carbon Steel. For Offset. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. and then click OK. structural beams. In the left pane. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. under Mechanical. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 6 In the Project Browser. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. verify that 9' 0" is selected. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. or architectural components. However. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you create project parameters and work with schedules. and click Properties. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. select Main. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. For Pipe Type.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). Next. For Offset. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. click Rename. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. In this exercise. select Fire Protection Wet. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type.

Design is highlighted. 6 In the drawing area. for Name. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. Under Categories. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. When you highlight a space using the cursor. click Training Files. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select Spaces. enter Zone 1. select space Instruction 221 as shown. click Add. select the upper half of the building.rvt. right-click. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. and click Element Properties. 5 Click OK twice. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . under Fire Protection. enter Sprinkler Zone. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Sprinkler Zone.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.Fire Protection Plan . and then click OK. select Fire Protection. the space crossing lines display. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 8 Using a crossing window. For Group parameter under.

10 In the Filter dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. and then click OK. under Fire Protection. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. verify that only Spaces are selected. you create schedules for sprinkler design. under Fire Protection. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then access instance properties. for Sprinkler Zone. 13 Using the same method. In the left pane of the Open dialog. to which you add various parameters. click Training Files. enter Zone 2.rvt. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. select Zone 1. for Sprinkler Zone. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. including a calculated value parameter. and then click OK.

create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. enter 15. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. For Rounding. select Spaces. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. select Length. For Name. select To the nearest 1'. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . for Name. Click OK. 11 Click OK twice. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . Click OK. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New.Design is highlighted. enter Maximum Spacing. 10 In the Format dialog. and click Field Format. In the Maximum Spacing column.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. For Units. select Feet and fractional inches. select Fire Protection. 9 On the Formatting tab. and on the ribbon. enter Protection Area Construction Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. For Group parameter under.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 Using the same method. Select Schedule keys. Obstructed-Combustible.Fire Protection Plan . click Add Parameter. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. click the Formatting tab. 14 Select the new header. For Key name. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Maximum Spacing. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Light. double-click on each column separator. 7 Click OK. The schedule displays. For Type of Parameter.

add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. under Available fields. Click OK. and press Enter. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. enter 130. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. enter Sprinkler Schedule. For Name. select Spaces. 16 Using the same method. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Unobstructed Extra.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra.

select 0 decimal place. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 19 Click the Formatting tab. Click OK. Select Header and Blank line. For Formula. enter Minimum Sprinklers. for Sort by. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and click View Properties. For Discipline. select Area. For Units. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 On the Formatting tab. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. For Rounding. select Level. select Minimum Sprinklers. and click Field Format. under Other. select Fixed. 22 Click OK twice. select Number. For Type. click Edit. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . The Sprinkler Schedule displays. for Sorting/Grouping. select Common. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. click . For Then by. select Sprinkler Zone. In the Fields dialog. Enter the formula operator / after Area. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. and click OK.

30 Click OK twice. and then select Hidden field. For Fields. and then click Field Format. select Minimum Sprinklers. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. and click View Properties. select Number. Under Field formatting. and select Totals only. ■ In the Format dialog. for Filter by. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Level equals Level 2. verify that Use default settings is selected. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Edit. For Then by (second instance). 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 27 In the drawing area. right-click the schedule. select Level. select Grand totals. select Sprinkler Zone. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Hidden field. for Filter.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. For Fields. At the bottom of the dialog.

use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. select Sprinklers. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Embedded Schedule. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Other. click Edit. select Grand totals. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. On the Formatting tab. and click View Properties. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. delete the word Maximum. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . Under Field formatting. select Calculate totals. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. System Name. and select Totals only. for Available fields. for Embedded Schedule. and Count. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. double-click Type. For Category. for Fields. select Count. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area.

and access the instance properties. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. under Identity Data. Unobstructed. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog.Fire Protection Plan Design. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 50 Access the instance properties. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Ordinary.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 46 With the space still selected. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 52 Click OK. select space 221 Instruction. double-click FP . select Ordinary. for Protection Area Construction Type. 41 In the plan view. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. As a result. select space 221 Instruction. but their values are not determined. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). under Identity Data. Unobstructed. Unobstructed. 44 In the schedule. 48 In the floor plan. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 43 Click Cancel. under Identity Data. for Protection Area Construction Type. and the spacing parameter values are evident. select Light.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

As you place the sprinklers.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. However.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. you can choose to save your work. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.rvt. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. After finishing each exercise.autodesk. methodology. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. At the end of this tutorial. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. go to http://www. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. 279 . you will understand the process. click Training Files. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. As you create the system. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and double-click Level 2 . By following the recommended workflow. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.

there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. When there is a small misalignment. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. When this happens. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 3 In the Project Browser.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. After placing the initial sprinkler. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers.

while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. and select Sprinkler . because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 10 Press Esc twice. select the sprinklers that you placed. 11 In the drawing area.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204.Pendent . Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. and click to place 3 sprinklers. 9 In space Instruction 202. as shown.

verify that Constrain is cleared. and then press Esc. you place non-hosted sprinklers. as shown. Next. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Also. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 13 On the Options Bar. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.

enter 11. for Offset. and click Element Properties. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. This number is determined in the schedule. For Number. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. specify a vertical offset. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. you place non-hosted sprinklers. open Design ➤ FP .FP_Ceiling view. Next. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.Fire Protection Plan . 19 In the floor plan.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. enter 10' 6". Adding Sprinklers | 283 .Design. move the cursor to the right. and press Enter. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Press Esc. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 17 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. 18 Type WT. and 200C). Notice that the schedule updates. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. enter 14' 6". click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 200B. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. you adjust the offset. 25 Click OK. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected.

30 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Unlike logical connections (systems). and then creating the logical connection between these system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. click Training Files. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and with piping (physical connection). Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. After creating the logical connection. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.Fire Protection Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping.rvt. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In this exercise. However.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.

they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. In the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. and select Piping. Creating a Piping System | 285 .2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. click View ➤ Systems. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 5 Right-click the header. named Fire Protection Wet. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. as shown. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. As you assign sprinklers to systems. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. within the Piping Systems folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building.

For Pipe Type. 13 In the System Browser. Next. The Edit Piping System panel displays. In the left pane. The Generate Layout tools are activated. verify that 9' 0" is specified.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 12 On the Options Bar. For Offset. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. providing system editing tools.Wet is selected. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. enter FP Wet_Zone2. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 11 With the system still selected. 14 Click Finish Editing System. indicating the logical connection. select an initial piping layout. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. and a piping layout preview displays. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. system equipment. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. and number of elements in the system. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. 15 In the drawing area. select Branch. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. place the cursor over a sprinkler. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. click Settings. press Tab. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. verify that Main is selected. 19 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. and select the system. and click Select. for System Name. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers.

verify that Network is selected. for Diameter. click Place Base. 23 For Offset. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 22 On the Options Bar. enter -12' 0". 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. click Solutions. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. and select solution 5. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component.20 On the Generate Layout panel. as shown. select 2". (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . When the layout is finished. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. and green represents branch lines). The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. In general. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0").

27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . A (parallel movement control) displays. On the Generate Layout panel. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. as shown. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. click Modify. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 29 Click Finish Layout. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers.

the Connect Into tool. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. or that offset elevations are incorrect. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Next. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. select a different layout solution. Either relocate the system components. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. 32 If necessary. and various manual pipe creation tools. or manually modify the pipe. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. and then you create piping to physically connect them. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 .

290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt.Fire Protection Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 If necessary. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and select the elbow fitting as shown.Design is highlighted. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .

13 Click Finish Layout. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and so on) are logically connected by a system. and select solution 5. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 12 On the Options Bar. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. click Finish Editing System. for Solution Type. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. you can select the pipe or duct. click Add To System. radiators. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 18 Click Finish Editing System.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. or a system component to display system tools. verify that Solutions is selected. air terminals. 9 On the Edit System panel. mechanical equipment. 5 In the drawing area. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 8 In the corridor. and pipe or duct is created. 14 Close the System Browser. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. verify that Network is selected.

and then tile the views. right-click. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and click Draw Pipe. 21 In the Piping Plan. 25 Select the sprinkler. 28 In the drawing area. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 29 Using the same method.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . for Offset. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 24 In the Piping Plan. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and then press Esc. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 27 On the Options Bar. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select 9'.

Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . 31 In the plan view. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Because the whole system highlights.

and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. select 1/4" = 1'-0". Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. click Training Files. ■ 6 Press Esc. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area.Fire Protection Plan . 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 On the Options Bar. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. double-click on the section head to open the section view. for Scale. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. select 4".21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. and maximize the floor plan. The pipe diameter is modified. 26 Using the same method. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 24 In the drawing area. and then tag the piping as shown. for Diameter. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 25 On the Options Bar. select 1 1/4". select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). as shown. 23 Close the 3D view.

For additional practice. In this exercise.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. You added tags to pipes.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. you created a wet fire protection system. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. In this tutorial. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.

create details. add annotations and dimensions. 305 . and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.

306 .

Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and click OK. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view.rvt. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. If the view included detail graphics. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and click Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. 3 In the Rename View dialog. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. dependent views. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and view references. matchlines. 307 . click Training Files. 2 In the Project Browser. and apply a view template. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. right-click Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Rename.

6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline.rvt. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Apply Default View Template. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and then press Esc. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. more focused. and click OK. views and put them on the sheet. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 4 Using the same method. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 6 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. and click OK. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and click Rename. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. click Training Files. 10 In the drawing area. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. create dependent views for areas B and C. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 9 Click OK.

16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Click OK. For Line Weight. click the current value. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 13 Press Esc twice. and click OK. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. select 11./ ---). 20 Select the upper view reference and. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . Creating Dependent Views | 309 . In the Color dialog. and then press Esc. 19 In the drawing area.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 21 Using the same method. for Target view. For Line Pattern. select Double Dash 5/8". select black. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. on the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color.

23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 25 Using the same method. as shown. 27 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. crop the dependent views for plans B and C.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. and zoom to each of the view references. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets.

and click Properties. select Plumbing Isometric. right-click Plumbing Isometric . select Plumbing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Click OK. right-click 3D Plumbing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Documentation. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. and click to select it. enter Plumbing Isometric . right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. The section crop lines no longer display. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. Under Graphics. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. for View Name. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. click Training Files. and click Apply Default View Template.29 Close the file with or without saving it. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views.Domestic Water. for View Classification.rvt. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. For Sub-Discipline. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 4 In the Project Browser. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. For Default View Template. and select the section box.Domestic Water.

312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. 12 Using the same method. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". and click to select it. and then click OK. select 3. press Tab 3 times. select Dash.9 Right-click. Click Apply. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Pattern. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. The selected piping displays as a dashed line.

and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. and click to select it. 14 Right-click. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . as shown). This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.

and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. On the View Control Bar.Sanitary Waste. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. In the drawing area. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar.15 Press Esc. and click to select it. Right-click.Domestic Water view with detailing. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . 17 Label the fixtures as shown. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . press Tab 3 times. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click Reveal Hidden Elements. 18 Using methods learned previously. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. On the View Control Bar.

For Slope. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Creating Callout Views | 315 . 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. In the Format dialog. select To the nearest 1/8". click on the Format value. and click to place the spot slope annotation.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. you use a plan view to create a callout view. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. as shown. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 21 Click OK twice. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. When the view is associated with a sheet. for Rounding. 25 Press Esc twice. verify that Common is selected. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.

7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.rvt. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. for Scale. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. indicating that it’s the active view. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. select 1/4"=1'-0''.

HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. Click OK. double-click M601 . drag it to the sheet. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 13 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 317 . using the same method. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. for Line Weight. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. select 5. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. enter WSHP PART PLAN. Click OK. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Title on Sheet. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. and select the viewport. 17 In the Project Browser. for View Name. right-click the callout view. and click Apply Default View Template. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Default View Template. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. Creating Callout Views | 319 .

24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and click OK. and click Apply View Template. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). under Names. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 25 In the Project Browser. right-click the detail view. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Rename. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.

Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. linetypes. duct tags. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. 321 . and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. ■ work with model-based components. and annotation to create a legend. symbols.

2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. click Training Files.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 8 With the text still selected. as shown. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

and a segment of rectangular duct. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. a return diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. Creating Annotations | 323 . 15 On the Options Bar. a segment of round duct. and then click Right Straight. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. as shown. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.9 Press Esc twice. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. verify that Leader is cleared. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection.

you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 17 Click Modify. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. clear Leader. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 22 In the Tags dialog. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. for Ducts.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 20 In the Tags dialog. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.rfa. and click Open. under Category. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. 24 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 21 In the Load Family dialog. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. click Load. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. If necessary.

31 On the Options Bar. 32 In the drawing area. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. Leader. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select Horizontal. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 26 On the Options Bar. as shown. Creating Annotations | 325 . and Attached End. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. and then press Esc.25 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A.

34 In the drawing area. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. as shown. select Free End. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Leader.33 On the Options Bar.

Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. for Leader Arrowhead. 40 Using the method learned previously. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style.36 Press Esc twice. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and all elements of that type are affected. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Creating Dimensions | 327 . Creating Dimensions In this exercise. not simply an instance property. select Dot Open 1/16". tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 37 In the drawing area. That’s because you changed a type property. lay out. select the last tag placed. and click OK. you use temporary dimensions to locate. and lock lighting fixtures. 39 In the Type Properties dialog.

On the Options Bar. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. select the dimension line. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then select the interior face of the wall. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 12 Press Esc. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected.

lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 16 Press Esc. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. linework. Because the dimensions are locked. annotation symbols. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.13 Using the same method. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . enter 8'.3 1/2"). click the 3 interior locks on the line. and notes. and press Enter. Creating a Legend | 329 . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. and offset them 8' from the wall. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 19 Using the same methods. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line.

Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. click Training Files. Click OK. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Using the same method. enter Diffuser Legend. For Scale. For View. select 1/4" = 1' -0". click below the title to place the diffuser.8 Neck. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Floor Plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 5 Click in the drawing area. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .rvt.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 .

annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.11 Press Esc. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Creating a Legend | 331 . and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 14 In the drawing area. click next to the top diffuser.

22 Zoom in to the copied component. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Press Esc. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. The selected detail lines are now thin. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .RISE symbol for the copy start point. 24 Select the component’s break line. and then press Esc. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.DROP and its text note. 26 Press Esc. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 27 While pressing Ctrl.

36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then click Modify. Creating a Legend | 333 .MECHANICAL LEGEND. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then click Modify. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. enter E. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.30 Select Spot Elevation . 34 Using the method learned previously.

334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.Detailing 15 In this lesson. 335 .113 East elevation view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A drafting view using detail components. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . and text.rvt. detail groups. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A detail callout that references another view.

Next. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 4 On the Options Bar.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. and click to place it.113 East on the sheet. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select each of the 2 panelboards. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 8 Using the same method. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 7 Drag the Power Riser . clear Leader.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 5 In the drawing area. and then modify and align the views. place Power Riser .

and click OK. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. for Title on Sheet. under Identity Data. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. right-click. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and click Activate View.9 Press Esc. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. giving the appearance of a single view. select the 113 North view. and click Deactivate View. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 13 Right-click. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right.

right-click. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. right-click.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 22 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Using the drag control. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. In the next exercise. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. you add wiring to the diagram. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. and click Activate View. select the 113 East elevation view. as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 19 Select the Level 1 line.

8 On the Options Bar. expand Lines. notice that there are no snaps active. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and then click OK. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. click Training Files. for Line Weight. as shown. verify that Chain is selected. In the Line Styles dialog. enter Electrical Power.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. 2 Close the Project Browser. In the New Subcategory dialog. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.113 North view. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 Beginning at the transformer. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. As you draw. indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. for Name. click New. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. select 6. Under Modify Subcategories.

10 Press Esc. as shown. enter 1/8". 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. for Offset.

TIP When you use the Trim tool. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . so that the result is as shown.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 29 Click Modify. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 28 Click above the cap. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown.

32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. select Multiple. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.31 While pressing Ctrl. 33 On the Options Bar. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. for Offset. enter 0 0. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 42 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc.5. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. enter 3/32". 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and press Enter.36 Press Esc. 39 Move the cursor to the right. You enter exact values for each line length. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 40 Press Esc.

and click OK. 50 With the group selected. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 47 In the drawing area. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Name. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. enter 0 0. you can ensure that they stay together. enter Ground. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. Press Esc. and press Enter. while pressing Ctrl. click on the length dimension value.125. select all 3 lines.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. and then press Esc. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 46 In the Project Browser.25. Using the same method.

54 Select the group. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 52 Select the detail group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B.51 Using the method learned previously. TP-2B.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). 59 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and click Rename. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. for Name. 5 Zoom in to view the section. In later exercises. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 2 Right-click the copy. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. click Training Files. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing .rvt. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and will place it on sheet E01. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here.

Back.6 Select the section box. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and then click the corner where the Top. and Left sides converge. and then press Esc. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . click Home. 7 On the ViewCube.

and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and click Apply View Template. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Walkthroughs. select 3D Views.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Under Names. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Click OK. select 3D HVAC Iso. right-click. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

(Right). 19 Complete the text labels. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Move the cursor down and to the left. and click to specify the second leader point. 15 Using the same method.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. Typical. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct.

Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. and under Extents. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and then click OK. as shown. under Extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. select Crop Region Visible. 23 Click on the crop region. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view.To rotate and reposition a text label. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 25 Click OK. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents.

select 3" = 1'-0". right-click the view name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 3 In the Project Browser. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. select the isometric view. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. and click Properties. click Training Files.29 In the drawing area. Place a detail component. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 353 .rvt. Click OK. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Use detail lines to create a detail group. For Scale. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise.

as the rectangle start point. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. select Documentation. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. select Plumbing. as shown. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. For View Classification. click the point at the top of the drain.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 9 Zoom in to the component. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 13 In the drawing area. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. for Sub-Discipline. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 12 On the Element panel. Click OK.

24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 21 In the drawing area. and click OK. 22 Click Modify. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. select the filled region. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 18 With the filled region still selected. Concrete.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 In the drawing area.P. for Type. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. (Line). and then press Esc. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. select C.I. 20 Select 1.

33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 34 Press Esc. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.28 Click Modify. 31 On the Options Bar. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then click to select them. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select Multiple. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point.

40 Click Finish Region. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. and then press Esc. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. (Rectangle). 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 45 Using the method learned previously. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . as shown.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

52 In the Create Group dialog. enter Flashing Membrane_F. as shown. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. draw wide detail lines as shown. 49 Click Modify. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. and then click to select them. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. select the Flashing Membrane group. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. press Tab to highlight the chain..D. and click OK. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. for Name.

58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.55 Press Esc. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 61 Using the same method. as shown.

Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 71 Click Modify. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User.62 Press Esc twice. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 64 Press Esc twice. 67 On the Options Bar. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 72 If necessary. select Leader and Free End. and then click OK. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown.

81 Select the text note. 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the second leader point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 78 Move the cursor to the left.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the text insertion point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 76 To select the leader start point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. as shown. 84 Using the following image as a guide. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

90 Press Esc. and click to place it. open P103 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and then press Esc twice.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 88 In the drawing area. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. select the view title.

select Auto-Detect. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. For A-----NPP.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. select 3. select Visible. For Import units. for Line Weight. you import a CAD detail drawing. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. For Colors. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. Click Open.rvt. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.dwg. select Black and White. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. Click OK. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. click Training Files. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Layers. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i.

Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and then press Esc.8 Type ZF. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 12 In the drawing area. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. select the viewport title. 11 Press Esc. open P103 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful